Home

2008 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

1. Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play ll Sales Code RER Multimedia System Jt Equipped xx ce eae es E Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 251 Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped 251 Clock Setting Procedure 251 H Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios Only 253 System Activation 000 254 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID isses 254 Selecting Satellite Mode 255 Satellite Antenna 000 255 Reception Quality es 24 4203 40 4469 0 e0e4 255 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 255 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone Manual Heater Only 00 259 if Equipped xzaxescdee ee Rer 257 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System Operating Instructions Video Entertainment Jf Equipped 425x225 er ae ea sis 261 Sy ete QVSPIUPEQUIDDEG sxe sates ts 29 Air Conditioning sese sess 264 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 258 Operating Tips ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 258 Mi Climate Controls ss sees 259 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EEEEEEEEEEEMAMAMAMAMMEIM
2. li Vehicle Loading 2 4 2o RR 342 Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 352 Certification Labele sieges rnea llle 342 Towing Requirements 04 353 B Trailer Towing a se cys andes eyes Ede 344 Towi g Tips 3 ioco idueca ares ees iser e 357 Common Towing Definitions 345 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 359 Trailer Hitch Classification 348 Towing 2WD Models 359 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Towing 4WD Models 360 Weight Ratings 348 en STARTING AND OPERATING 271 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and depress the clutch pedal before starting ve hicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor 4WD Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to depress the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the tr
3. CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flashers 364 Preparations For Jacking 367 H if Your Engine Overheats 365 Jacking Instructions 00 368 H Jacking And Tire Changing 366 Mllumpotar ng iere suis 9 RR serenata Jack Location er RES EX RY E ees 366 MH Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Spare Tire Stowage 0000 367 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the switch on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To turn the warning flashers off press the switch again us ne es Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS CAUTION In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac Driving with a hot cooling system could damage tion your vehicle If the temperature gauge re
4. 00000 101 Tip Start seces 3 e e bib x 25d dba ce ese 272 Tire and Loading Information Placard 317 318 Tire Identification Number TIN 316 Tire Markings sg sss sis ak See Snape en ers Baa 313 Tire Safety Information 00 313 Trese EE rae dae ek eras Be ee aie G 321 442 Air Pressure 2 0 ce ee 322 Alignment and Balance 000 328 Chains 422 uy Peas SR Ree oe YS 329 Changing ite hs oeque anon igo a arate Eas 366 General Information 0 00005 321 High Speed i deed RR 324 Inflation Pressures llle 322 Jacking os cas ae es Gee RR 366 369 Load Capacity 0 0 tati 317 318 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 330 Pressure Warning Light 210 Quality Grading ss s s sme tke eR ee oes 442 RACIAL as ER LESSE e ESTE 325 Replacement ids bb eR ders 327 Rotation ese we a a e RE eS 329 Safety uie ric enu te Ke b Cede a ber erar 313 SIZES vus dn dvs cay vm dre d mes 314 ee INDEX 461 Spare Tire ines Sede ea a REE mesed irik 367 SPINNING presite ake e odeur n a aa Bahar 325 Tread Wear Indicators 000 326 To Open Hood i 2ss f RR ke ee 94 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 352 Torque Converter Clutch 0040 285 Tow Hooks Emergency 0000000 374 TOWING iex 9er heess 344 374 Disabled Vehicle sese 374 Guid ina ede to e ac d e Rae e 348 Recreational e
5. 260 262 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 100 Diagnostic System Onboard 379 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 250 Dimmer Switch Headlight iL 98 Dipsticks Oil Engine ei os cag ee peser unirii 383 Disabled Vehicle Towing sies 374 Disarming Theft System psi eresse otimaa a 18 Disposal Engme Oil sosete diea ER aE wed cae 385 Used Coolant Antifreeze 397 Door Locks 1 0 0 0 cece ee eee 31 32 DOORS 45 uebu o 3 PUR CEN SS Hod Sob aa ad eka uE 26 Drive Belts usas bra ER RR RERO 386 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 0 0 0 0 005 87 DHAVING PET 294 Off Pavement lle 294 Off Road xeu aate RR E INE elt Baha 294 Dual Top eses strideties 120 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 116 Electrical Power Outlets 00 116 Electronic Brake Control System 105 Anti Lock Brake System less 105 Brake Assist System 00000 107 Electronic Roll Mitigation 108 Electronic Stability Program 109 Traction Control System 04 106 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 108 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Electronic Stability Program ESP 109 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 214 Emergency Brake s s Ee tes Ie ERR den 308 Emergency In Case of Brake Warning Light
6. 207 Coolant Temperature Gauge 209 Hazard Warning Flasher 450 INDEX M Jacking esae spesokee v E vede 366 Jump Starting iss sek m Rex tena ainas 371 Tow HOOKS 54m 244 844 Rep RID De 374 Emission Control System Maintenance 380 428 Engine soret ene dea EE SRI peu re d 75 Air Cleaner llle 389 Block Heatef 2222 RR RR 275 Break In Recommendations 75 Compartment ossaa seana a a a eee eee 378 Compartment Identification 378 Exhaust Gas Caution 0004 75 339 Fails to Start 2 ee 273 Flooded Starting 005 273 Fuel Requirements 336 424 Jump Starting eese ee aa eR Rege ios 371 Ol gd fet E ae eee eee a 383 424 Oil Disposal ic op ERE EE 385 Oil Filter 2 0 09 bead geaiae Bes L een cen 385 Oil Selection s dua aces a RR alt BaP 424 Operation secerek ed ea eare sesei Es 75 Overheating uc pea apio es ah C S Red dea 365 DIaEUDg va suy bis eed PEG ad s 271 Temperature Gauge llle ess 209 Engine Oil Viscosity a eras Tiana nea a 384 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 0 384 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 59 Entry System Illuminated 19 Event Data Recorder llle 60 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 000 4 75 339 Exhaust System 6 llle 393 Extender Seat Belt 00 000 000 00008 50 Exterior Finish Care ss asss iiien ees 407 Fabric Care ikke xa ROC
7. 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Fog Light 1 Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia and disconnect the electrical connector from underneath 2 Turn the bulb 1 4 turn counterclockwise CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lights 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock wise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 1 Remove t
8. Jeep OWNER S MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION sceckeewase9 car ROUTES TEES DESEO NOTES STS V APA VE REV FR ES 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee H hn n 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee hh 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e eeeeeeeeeeee hh nnn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc eer c ccc c eer r eee hh hh 9 hn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cee ccc ccc cece eee cece hh hh hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece treis Ke hh hh 9 hh hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES celles c cece kE Eeer e heh hh hh hs 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece ccc cece cece reece hh hh hn 10 INDEX 5 58 98 8 188180908 asa wae ERINE EEEREN EEEE EENE R6 Wi T NN A INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B iotrod cti n solae soi rur eae 4 WW Warnings And Cautions 8 B Rollover Warning 224r t RR bess 5 Vehicle Identification Number 8 ll How To Use This Manual 4 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to be
9. es STARTING AND OPERATING 361 CAUTION NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral on automatic transmission equipped vehicles turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash WARNING Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the trans fer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to steps 7 8 above You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position Shifting Out Of Neutral N disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move normal usage despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in 1 Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de the vehicle press clutch pedal on manual transmission 2 Shift transfer case lever into desired position 3 Shift automatic transmission into DRIVE or release clutch on manual transmissions 362 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button on
11. ll Sunrider Two Door Models If Equipped ll Sunrider Four Door Models If Equipped ll Soft Top Four Door Models 132 134 135 138 141 143 152 161 164 Folding Down The Soft Top 170 Putting Up The Soft Top 180 H Folding Windshield 191 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bats xut eae dee ea a eye EE 193 Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bats 5 usu aad E sedg haue Se gos 196 ll Rear Window Features Hard Top Only 197 Rear Window Wiper Washer It Equipped 4 340 esee eter teris 197 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 198 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror NIGHT Adjusting Rearview Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors 1 To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s LEE to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight 2 ape e Ve
12. ocu oes bee cP eS ee eee ee 118 ll Electronic Brake Control System 105 Console Storage Compartment 118 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 105 Rear Storage Compartment 119 TCS Traction Control System 106 W Dual Top If Equipped BAS Brake Assist System 107 Removing The Soft Top 120 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 108 Installing The Soft Top llus 122 ESP Electronic Stability Program 100 W Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top 125 ESP BAS Warning Light 115 Front Panel s Removal 126 Bl Electrical Power Outlet 000 116 Front Panel s Installation 128 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 117 Front Panel s Installation Only B Cupholders oona me 117 Ds Rear Haid Top Removed q sedanani TR Front Cupholders esareti a aone tare ia 117 a A e Rear Cupholders see 118 Rear Hard Top Installation 131 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se E Door Frame 2 0 00 eee eee Door Frame Removal Two Door Models Door Frame Installation Two Door Models Door Frame Removal Four Door Models Door Frame Installation Four Door Models ll Soft Top Two Door Models Folding Down The Soft Top Putting Up The Soft Top
13. 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 JUMP STARTING z If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may VARMNG be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e Do not use a 24 volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the boo
14. 20 gigabyte hard drive HDD and the UConnect Hands Free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Not Equipped With UConnect message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows easy menu selec tion while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertain ment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identi fication selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
15. Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of
16. Four Door Models l l 92 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To Raise The Rear Seat llus 94 MH Windshield Wipers And Washers 100 ll To Open And Close The Hood 94 Intermittent Wiper System isses een 100 Blihts 99 RRRLRSRR 95 Windshield Wiper Operation 100 Interior Lights sese o ee Sen 95 Windshield Washers llis 101 Multifunction Control Lever 97 Mist Feature cos dt ox face d RE ete 101 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights B Tit Steering Column sscesckceoc emn 101 adc M A ee ce aa paea ue H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 102 Peg E abate gru as ea is E EC T 102 Headlight Dimmer Switch 98 To Set At A Desired Speed orris ira 103 Posen ENE Meat ee hate nem qidee ddp d To Deactivate ed us d vei oe 103 Bape Hag TURRIS a ardeo redepsd i To Resume Speed sse xr Ren 103 Turn Signals i23 cxx ERE EX ev cy es 99 To Vary The Speed Setting isses 10 Day ene Buon Hehe EC DOMI BERG aequat 5 Manual Transmission less 104 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 To Accelerate For Passing aos esee xn 105 M Storag
17. High Beam Indicator 000050 207 Hitches Trailer TOWIDg unas cete sora ND Rc nc d 348 Holder Cup 2 22300 ach Ca ere erem ett s 117 Hood Release 1 ER hd t RR RR ire 94 Hoses ipe Ice o Gtk GR CERES 399 400 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid sso seas ccssar naa sas 403 Igr tiOns x inkaa geret eoe de Ras sana es 12 en INDEX 453 Key 28 ae eed eed ip RES die RR garde 12 Ignition Key Removal lesse 12 Illuminated Entry 0 0 0 cee eee 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 0 14 Infant Restraint llle 63 Inflation Pressure Tires 00 322 Inside Rearview Mirror lesen 83 Instrument Cluster 200000000 205 Instrument Panel and Controls 204 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 410 Integrated Power Module Fuses 413 Interior Appearance Care 004 409 Interior Lights ss esae neg e nt Ue os 95 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 100 Introductiott aterra endear FRE pa ian 4 Jack Location nn cn cece m Rr ee 366 Jack Operation cce RR ER 366 368 369 Jacking Instructions 00000 368 Jump Starting 2339 a egre donar S bars doe 371 Key Programming seres peressecs pieis 16 Key Replacement vss ceri kisrenesgiisi istai 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 14 Key In Reminder 0 00 d eee eee 14 Keyless Entry System esses 19 Keys castos duda 68 ola wd dete
18. Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the park lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if pro grammed 81931ecc Remote Start Key Fob Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the Remote Start button once 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The park lamps will remain illuminated to indicate that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is running The lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the key fob Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if
19. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either 344 STARTING AND OPERATING EE the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight i
20. Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow t
21. Spark Plugs 2ecakecem e piirata 386 Catalytic Converter esses 386 Crankcase Emission Control System 388 Fuel Filter i R Rx 388 ini Engine Air Cleaner Filter 389 Maintenance Free Battery less 389 Air Conditioner Maintenance 390 Power Steering Fluid Check 391 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Driveline And Steering Component Lubricationo s 2 sc sth ds ean sae ee ead 392 Body Lubrication 0 05 392 Windshield Wiper Blades 392 Windshield And Rear Window Washers 393 Exhaust System 0000000 393 Cooling System e se cree Rer em 394 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 399 Brake System usap 00sec e 399 Automatic Transmission 401 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission eere 403 Manual Transmission sss 403 Transter Case x 224 4 9440 bog 4284 o s 404 Front Rear Axle Fluid Maintenance After Off Road Driving Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Wi Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module li Vehicle Storage ll Replacement Bulbs If Equipped ll Bulb Replacement Head Light Front Park Turn Signal Front Side Marker Front Fog Light Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lights es MAINTAIN
22. blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel and California Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited
23. e The ESP BAS Warning Light comes on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position The left side outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting The right side outlet has power available only when the ignition is on This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit Power Outlets es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YO
24. follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering e Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Win dows WASHING Use MOPAR Car Wash or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support top from underneath 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M RINSING Be sure to remove all trace of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching Removes fine scratches
25. hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or har
26. may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 en MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Replace the air conditioning filter 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent 18 000 30 000 18 trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 600 mi 20 000 km or 12 months aoe ie E Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 600 mi 20 000 km or 12 months i ud Mb M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 H 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Emm N Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage i are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Inspect the front su
27. peak traction characteristics 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 446 INDEX aa ABS Anti Lock Brake System 208 309 Adding Fuel ue exte E Re 340 Adding Washer Fluid leise 198 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 389 Air Conditioner Maintenance 390 Air Conditioning less 261 264 Air Conditioning Controls 264 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 265 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 3
28. the chime was heard 8 Using the key fob to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simulta neously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional key fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed key fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE key fob contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in the RKE key fob The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station t
29. 11 Seat Belt Pretensioners lise 48 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert 1 2 m s 49 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 50 Seat Belt Extender llle 50 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS llle 51 Child Restraint 0 000 000 0000 00000008 62 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 75 a cie DPs uoeecesek ko tenementa 75 Exhaust Gas vec kw Ge cee okie RR 75 2 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VENICE secca otav deret t er a es hae das 76 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle wy cae dee ee RR see oes ees 77 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Manual Transmission If Equipped 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY ACC position 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Positions 2 Push the ignition key inward 3 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 4 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and rem
30. 18 Close front header latches 17 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any Ee UU ene Ge TE eee Frame in this section 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 Sail Panel 5 Plastic Retainer 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid rearward over Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only 5 Before attaching the header latches be sure that the top retainers above the door are not trapped between the top and the door frame es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 6 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails Sunrider Models Only 7 Open the head
31. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by th
32. At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addi tion the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a bl
33. Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within CAUTION 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF CD player mechanism n D NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel convertible or soft top models if equipped away and jam the player mechanism a SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the of the current selection or return to the beginning of the other side is a
34. Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 8L Manual 3 21 2 Door X 4 987 lbs 25 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 262 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 2 Door X 5 987 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 716 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L 3 73 2 Door X 6 032 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Model 4WD 2 736 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 2 Door Sahara 5 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 342 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 2 Door Sahara 6 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 795 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L 3 73 2 Door Sahara 6 163 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Model 4WD 2 795 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 4 10 2 Door Rubi 6 236 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 kg con Model 2 829 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 350 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 3 8L 4 10 2 Door Rubi 6 281 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs Automatic con Model 2 849 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 91 kg 4WD 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door X 5 121 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ib 100 Ibs Model 2WD 2 323 kg 2 97 sq m s 453 kg 45 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door X 7 621 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Model 2WD 3 457 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X 7 647 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Model 2WD 3 469 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L Ma
35. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 340 STARTING AND OPERATING EE ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle 81c8c3de Fuel Filler Cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off E STARTING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION WARNING Damage to the fuel system or emissio
36. Manual Override 279 M Malle AG ME 27 Brake Transmission Interlock System 281 Se NE PRA paar et ea R RES SSS idi Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 281 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 275 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Se lll Four Wheel Drive Operation Command Trac Or Rock Trac If Equipped 285 Operating Instructions Precautions 285 Shift Positions se cem RR exu 287 shifting Procedure sse eae ae as 288 Bi Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped 289 E Axle Lock Tru Lok Rubicon Models 290 lll Rear Axle Lock 4WD Non Rubicon Models lf Equipped se em 291 lll Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect If Equipped 292 Bl On Road Driving Tips 294 ll Off Road Driving Tips 0 294 Side Step Removal If Equipped 294 The Basics Of Off Road Driving 296 When To Use 4L Low Range 297 Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation 297 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 297 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High POUMS MT PE 299 Hill Climbing 0000 301 Driving Through Water 0 0 304 After Driving Off Road 307 H Parking Brake oos Re 308 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 0 309 la Power Steering euek
37. OPERATING Se The Basics of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation en STARTING AND OPERATING 297 When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling
38. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the six to eight second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In
39. The parking This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together m brake should always be applied when the driver is forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same not in the vehicle speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on wet or dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position 288 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 of this manual 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 50 mph 80 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the
40. Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Following off road usage completely inspect the under body of
41. Waxing 00005 407 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 250 USB 2524 e oS SS aE See ER Ee 250 Power Distribution Center Fuses 413 Doo Locks acs ing ote ee Shes Be oS ae 33 OL6GEIDE cng Cone Et eit eg Re De 311 391 Wind OWS 202 45 cfg EREE ea Re RR oS 36 en INDEX 457 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 50 Preparation for Jacking 00 367 Pretensioners Seat Belts ooo ocos ave ea ove aa 48 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 4 22 Radial Ply Tires 2 0 0 0 0 cece 325 Radio Broadcast Signals 4 220 Radio Navigation 0 0 000000 250 Radio Operation 00000004 251 258 Radio Satellite 0 0 250 251 253 Radio Sound Systems 0040 250 Rear Axle Differential 00 405 Rear Swing Gate scree dte dos dn xe pisari 38 Rear Window Defroster llle 198 Rear Window Features 004 197 Rear Wiper Washer ees 197 Rearview Mirrors csse eee or RR es Rue 83 Recorder Event Data 0 0000000008 60 Recreational Towing 0 000000 e 359 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 360 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 361 Reformulated Gasoline 00 336 Refrigerant uk hea Rae RW gs 391 Release Hood 1 00 cc es 94 Reminder Lights On 0 0 0 0 ee
42. a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Shift Lock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel above the PARK position 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down 5 Depress the shifter release button and shift into NEU TRAL 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depr
43. adequate capacity Failure to do this Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a 4 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration RIGHT STOP TURN hen LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN PINS PARK ies GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 357 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the OVERDRIVE range should be selected NOTE Using O D OFF while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide b
44. allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanis
45. belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se seat as far back as possible and use the proper chil
46. build bottom of rear window and set aside ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up tal rain snow etc the Soft Top in this section CAUTION Do not move your vehicle until the top has been NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Removal 3 Turn rear L shaped lock located above shoulder belt NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing anchorage right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move to the side 2 Turn center L shaped locks 2 from center of roof panel 81cd523e es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 4 Turn rear fasteners knobs located on overhead 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they canbe windshield removed esse 81913909 6 Remove panel To remove right panel follow steps above except for step 2 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Installation NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the
47. climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks 302 STARTING AND OPERATING EE branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to comple
48. either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by your autho rized dealer 31 Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer later in this section 32 Compass Mini Trip Computer Button If Equipped Press this button to switch between the different func tions COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED This feature located on the instrument cluster speedom eter and tachometer displays information on outside temperature compass direction and trip information 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Control Buttons Press and release the left butt
49. ex v3 BE RR RU es 250 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 004 399 Vehicle Certification Label 342 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading i sess dhe re Bk eas 318 342 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage ERR 266 419 Viscosity Engine Oll sce fee ee eel i es 384 Warning Flasher Hazard 364 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 206 Warning Roll Over 0 0 00 e eee eee 5 Warnings and Cautions 00 8 Warranty Information 5 440 Washer Adding Fluid 00040 198 Washers Windshield 393 Waxing and Polishing llle 407 Wheel Alignment and Balance 328 Wheel and Wheel Trim 409 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 409 Wheel Mounting 0000 e eee 370 Wind Buffeting seces xem ect dee 38 Window Fogging ea mige d eee eee 265 WindOWSs deme 24 RR Roe s 36 POWE us aae uni we esce MORIR Ee Od RC 36 Windshield Folding iliis 191 en INDEX 463 Windshield Washers sss 100 393 Idi EP 393 Windshield Wiper Blades scots ceti sese riss 392 Windshield Wipers 000000 an 100 Wiper Reat sises op abe Pee a CEU ani SOR 197 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 409 SERVICE Stick with the Specialists DaimlerChrysler Co
50. five seconds for the system bulb check 5 Turn and hold the steering wheel one half turn to the right clockwise 6 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 7 Turn the steering wheel back to center and turn and hold an additional one half turn to the left counterclock wise 8 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 9 Turn the steering wheel back to center 10 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 11 Cycle the ignition key to OFF After performing the ESP disable procedure correctly ESP OFF will be displayed in the odometer for approxi mately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON Repeating the ESP disable procedure will re enable nor mal ESP operation ESP BAS Warning Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is ESP combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE
51. for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror times when the windshield is down Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury on road use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to removing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Open sport bar Velcro covering 4 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on bottom side of side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt 13 mm on top of the side bar 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Pull side bar out ho
52. front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 05 12 Ignition Key Removal lesen 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 Mi Steering Wheel Lock 0004 14 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 14 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 W Sentry Bey sk pa ess BE RRR CEN RSs 14 Replacement KEYS e usec vep ensada eea 16 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information 00 17 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 18 To Set The Alarm a i occas Re RR 18 To Disarm The System 0200 18 H illuminated Entry oer ra n en 19 ll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 19 To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 20 To
53. if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door 6 Ensure that the top locks into Sunrider locking mecha frame tracks and slide the top forward nisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 81926dc3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame 9 Before attaching the header latches be sure the top retainers above the doors do not get trapped between the top and the door frame Also make certain the feet at both ends of the 2 bow forward most bow seat properly on the side bows above the front doors They should cradle the tubing Finally make sure that the check strap the long woven strap reaching from the rear bow to the 2 bow does not get entangled in any of the framework when unfolding the top es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 10 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches th
54. in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the
55. is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have th
56. locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se gm Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back
57. of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze coolant needs to be added contents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50 HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increas
58. of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coa
59. on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method 306 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk o
60. or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you caus ing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury Side Airbag Location Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior items may cause serious injury during inflation trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment Do not store or place items under the front seats You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat
61. power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud and Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Don t shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the ti
62. pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes 324 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a ve
63. rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit en STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each You or others could be injured if you leave the transfer case mode position see the information below vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving Hard surfaced roads disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move 4H Position regardless of the transmission position
64. ret tarta Ene 386 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 0 0 00 ee eee 336 Oil 2258 Sedans as et PXIPA POR PESE 384 Speed Control Cruise Control 102 Speedometer cose voi dene edie RET 206 DLarUip ua sobs nac e epa Odes bg Nodes dns 271 Automatic Transmission 271 Cold Weather 0 0000 cee eee ee 272 Engine Block Heater 04 275 Engine Fails to Start 0000 273 Manual Transmission sn 271 R mole cerigos xx RRR ESR ERS 25 Steering POWER cox die Shin e eh eS Ane a a E eA qs 311 391 Tilt Column iud estes ai ec ed a he edd 101 Wheel Loek 2424 00 648364 24 23 2464 E SET 004 14 Wheel THE 4 ick oad cx Gok ees Be Ses 101 OLOTape cease Pes eb ed eae eR AUR Ra 118 419 Storage Behind the Seat 0 119 10 460 INDEX M Storage Vehicle 4 2 ie 9 266 419 Storing Your Vehicle 0000000 419 SUNTIGER Reale od peste S GG DEE ES 161 164 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 51 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 292 Swing Gate Rear 2 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 38 System Navigation 000000 250 System Remote Starting 0 0 25 Tachometer 2 6 0 cesar ee m RR 209 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 209 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Theft System Arming s sosse tes llle 18 Theft System Disarming llle 18 Tilt Steering Column
65. sale Rs 409 411 Fabric Top etre ccs pe pete PER e hers 411 Filters Air Cleaner 464 a0 stb Rm eR we ews 389 Engine Fuel os eres oes aa ak eee 388 nn INDEX 451 Engine Oil vk pesce Pa oie ees eae 385 Fit shiCame iua eere E a toe deck a Rc 407 Flashers Hazard Warning 00000 s ee eee 364 Tum Signal oan see eee desea ot 207 421 422 Flooded Engine Starting 4 273 Fluid Capacities 6 2 eee 424 Fluid Level Checks 0 0 0 0 0000005 405 Automatic Transmission 401 Engine OW i is uta sacer des Oase d eden 383 Manual Transmission 404 Power Steering reb aee alae ta eee 391 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 425 Fog Light Service oon Res 422 Bog Liglits eraser Ee que x RR Pent hd 99 422 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 0 04 89 Folding Rear Seat ie conceit we Renee 92 Folding Windshield 0 000 006 0050 191 Four Wheel Drive 0 000 eee eee 285 SAINE Aceh Seg EP Reed dedere tai 287 Four Wheel Drive Operation 285 Four Way Hazard Flasher 364 Front Axle Differential lees 405 Fuel ieu xam xS Ce E EXER NS 336 Filler Cap Gas Cap 00 0000000 340 Pill k 2e ta heed anne ea deese ES 388 Gasoline sprosser n seeded ose ge 5x qs 336 Gatge cda se er dia Pa Sey e UR ss Coe N 206 Materials Added 00 004 338 Octane Rating 0 0 eee eee 336 Req
66. should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemenial This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right Resiraint Systems SRS front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The front passenger airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity 81c74ba2 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are WARNING located inside the driver and front passenger seats and x their covers are also labeled SRS Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers
67. shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re setting the desired vehicle SET speed Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain and or more frequent downshifts auto transmission only may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
68. start after you have followed the WARNING Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the causing serious personal injury engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not in another vehicle This type of start can be dan have enough power to continue running when the key is engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the e
69. that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly In a collision you or others in your vehicle could Subwoofer be injured if seats are not properly latched to their 2 Unplug electrical connector from rear subwoofer if floor attachments Always be sure that the seats equipped are fully latched 3 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull the seat out and away from lower bracket 5 Remove the seat from the vehicle Release Bar Location Replacing the Rear Seat Two Door Models Reverse steps for removing the seat WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the ve hicle e The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary To Fold Down the Rear Seat to reposition the fr
70. the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M will flash anytime the ESP or TCS is active and helping to improve vehicle stability If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 27 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light D p This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected The O D OFF button is located on the center console 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the front sway SWAY bar is disconnected BAR 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 for more information 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control System If a prob lem is detected while the engine is running the light will
71. the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD
72. the Security Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOORS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area will display the word door as an indication of a door ajar or not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 If any other active warnings including gATE gAS CAP noFUSE CHANgE OIL or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped ines ai Upper Half Door Window Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door 1 Grasp the half door window and pull up 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully 2 Unplug the wiring harness connector
73. the most out of your child necessary to use a locking clip For the seat belt with restraint the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode ear lier in this section e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manu
74. tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed a
75. will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight key fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional key fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering the program mode using that key fob all other programmed key fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with a Sentry Key 1 Enter the vehicle and close all of the doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the ignition key into the ignition 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the UNLOCK button 6 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All key fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when
76. window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Insert finger behind the plastic retainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Repeat this on the opposite side 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 5 Open the swing gate 4 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the 6 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in loops on the windshield 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the i swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets 81b34aa7 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the edge of the side window top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from 81925332 the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 10 Finish releasing the
77. 120 000 200 000 120 E 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle i at toad eset Ree Tees 437 Prepare For The Appointment 437 Prepare A Lista ios ha nn eo 437 Be Reasonable With Requests 437 H If You Need Assistance 000055 437 DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center 6 0 0 0 00000 ee eee 438 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center usa eer ke hea GS Up y edid d 438 In Mexico Contact 0 illie 438 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 439 Service Contract 0 0 0 0 0 0008 439 Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 440 B MOPAR Parts 440 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 0 440 In The 50 United States And Washington DC cogn e eR 440 In Canada ua eder denen d a uae sa 441 436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bl Publication Order Forms 0 441 Traction Grad
78. 9 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require servic
79. 91 Air Conditioning System ills 264 Air Filt r d12ecasaauwercuk ux ex bR3 HER AES 389 Air Pressure Tires llle 322 DPA m 51 Airbag Deployment saed at amaii 57 Airbag Light es uw kee ahah Ren ha 60 208 Airbag Maintenance 0 000000 nessa 59 Aitbag Side izexSedusgue oes E Redes 57 Alarm Security Alarm llle 18 Alignment and Balance Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio sess 255 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 424 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 105 309 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 208 Appearance Care 1 eee eee 406 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Audio Systems Radio 0 00000 250 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Automatic Transmission llle 401 Fluid and Filter Changes 401 Fluid Level Check 00 00005 401 Fud Typ uar ertet ertet qe ei aen 401 Gear Ranges isan ie ss ed paced E eee eae 281 Shilling sighs sernentertit doe m ariete ers 281 Special Additives llle 403 Torque Converter 4322933 tae em Rt 285 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 116 Auxiliary Power Outlet sss 116 en INDEX 447 AXIO LOCK ss Lee ddr ede Rate 290 291 Battery S T 389 Emergency Starting 00004 371 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Drive lee 386 Belt
80. 93 when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal or 4L refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this driving conditions section and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash WARNING until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is t Side indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph again 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return
81. AL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs Bitaddit en STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems Tire Pressure You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated 322 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Economy Tire Inflation Pressures Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to deve
82. AT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to ensure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal o
83. CD should not be used and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of can cause damage to the player the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD MP3 modes RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD SCAN Button Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable
84. CE cuo Gee OR RC aee S S RR aae 420 Engine Temperature Warning 209 Side Marker ie isa re Re e eme as 422 li TEE 99 422 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 210 Hazard Warning Flasher 364 Traction Control eose sed ner 213 Headlight Switch wesa okeana ma a aaa eaa i 97 TUN Sisal geu Sd xd er 99 207 421 422 Headlights esu e mre D 420 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 206 High Beam s ose see eie vetere tis 207 Loading Vehicle s rsrs praa me etn 342 WARS cog is dds HH pde eee SR Se eR 317 Locking Ax eR ene ERREUR a 290 291 Locks DOOL 6 Sea a eae a cee age Ra UP e 31 32 Power DOOR urs che ee aha ose eo Ri ee oe ee 33 Steering Wheel 4 2 5a eo pay esie eps 14 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 235 5 2 354900083 se e503 dia eas 68 69 Lubrication Body se ee aia aia ee 392 Maintenance Free Battery 04 389 Maintenance Procedures 0 000000 383 Maintenance Schedule Ln 428 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 213 380 Manual Service llle 441 Manual Transmission 275 403 Fluid Level Check llle 404 Lubricant Selection llle 403 Shift5peeds i seed anre Gin re nat 276 INDEX Master Cylinder Brakes Mini Trip Computer Mirrors Outside Rearview Modifications Alterations Vehicle Modular Hard Top Monitor Tire Pressure System Mopar Parts MP3 Player Multi Function
85. CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C Li LOAD J 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 REQ Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at e
86. Control Lever Navigation Radio Navigation System New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer 455 456 INDEX EE ji 2442s xe D D AMI 210211 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 294 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 294 Oil Change Indicator 0 04 212 Oil Change Indicator Reset 212 Oil ENGINE uagzagdu9accid qx edo xa pedea 383 Capacity oce ete oq em ed tages s Oh ees 424 Dipstick cesa epe aa E gene Saag ats 383 Filter 2 5 tometer eee a GUN CICERO WES Rog 385 Identification Logo llli 384 Materials Added to llle 385 Pressure Warning Light 207 Recommendation s 384 424 Viscosity i sci sce erred E tetes 384 424 Oil Pressure Light 1 2 soe ER 207 Onboard Diagnostic System 379 380 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 0 84 Overheating Engine 24 exer kes 365 Owner s Manual Operator Manual Paint Care 222ls soie terere ed E RN 406 Paint Damage ioc sare eor OR rd RR TR ds 406 Panic Alarm llis 21 Parking Brake i osezo4 ee ek i e ps 308 Passing Light arx eere amma vd Rs 99 PCV Valve pressa eera ter ede eae ee na eS 388 Pet 25 att babe va badd oa Gd exa one exe 74 Phone Cellular 85 250 251 Phone Hands Free UConnect 85 250 251 Placard Tire and Loading Information 318 Polishing and
87. Digit um Personality Persnlty Display Public Public No program type or Kone Rhythm and Blues R amp B undefined e i IE ZU Religious Music Rel Musc E F i t Religious Talk Rel Talk a S m Rock Rock C zx oc n oc Soft Soft ollege DE Soft Rock Soft Rck Country County Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports pS POR PONS 0000 E P Talk Talk azz azz News News Top Tops Weather Weather Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press
88. E The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Turn Signals Move the multifunction control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mi 2 km Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft 1 m They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the in
89. ECCC NN INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 81625955 1 Air Outlet 6 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Power Outlet 3 Horn 8 Lower Switch Bank 4 Radio 9 Auxiliary Power Outlet 5 Glove Box UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81918b50 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION Your vehicle is equipped with the instrument cluster described on the following pages 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on for three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light comes back on immediately or comes on while driving it means that there is a problem with the charging system or the battery is low Also a chime will sound if the light comes back on See your authorized dealer immediately 3 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6L this light will turn on
90. G AND OPERATING EE WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics result ing in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling i and stress to steering and suspension components Alignment and Balance You could lose control and have an accident resulting Poor suspension alignment may result in may result in false speedometer and odometer readings in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided other than what was originally equipped on your wear vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose e Vehicle pull to right or left control and have an accident e Fast tire wear T Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad h h equate speed capability can result in sudden tire Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho failure and loss of vehicle control rized dealer for proper diagnosis ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Improper alignment w
91. Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top
92. HICLE 123 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip sport bar covers b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M c Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets CAUTION d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a T30 Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug screws if they are overtightened being careful not to cross thread the screws or over tighten es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 5 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD should be discarded It was intended as a protective TOP cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual CAUTION tap wrap e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi 6 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for tional loads such as roof racks spare tires
93. ING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 423 Engine sereas 25 nde se Sheena ete PES os 424 W Fluid Capacities ies rrr he 424 Chassis pace een ered b EO Rx ERES 425 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 424 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L FUSES INTEGRATED AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINEOIL BRAKE FLUID POWER MODULE BATTERY TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER COOLANT AIR CLEANER COOLANT WASHER STEERING FLUID PRESSURE CAP FILTER BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 8191f0ee es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light o
94. Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 20 Using The Panic Alarm 21 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 21 Power Door Locks If Equipped 33 Programming Additional Transmitters 22 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 34 General Information 0 0 23 Automatic Door Locks 000 35 Battery Replacement 5 2 gWindaWs ca ve0e 24d x Ee o 36 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 Power Windows If Equipped 36 e 2 dco cm codo CR ER SONORES ROS 26 Rear Power Windows Four Door Upper Half Door Window Removal Models Only 5 as oe 4469 eal e bak 37 IF Equipped cech oese res en 27 Wind Buffeting 0 00 0 e eee 38 Upper Half Door Window Installation H Rear Swing Gate 0 0 0 eee 38 PERE ea Genes raw aes Pt 7 E Occupant Restraints csse e tee 40 Front Door Removal lesen 28 Lap Shoulder Belts esee 41 Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 29 Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Mi Door Locks sore ece RR ERR x 31 Lock Out Four Door Models Only 46 Manual Door Locks 000005 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 47 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
95. MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension m e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs m
96. Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower
97. NSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Other special features include direct tune music type selections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed
98. ON appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction e The soft top is not designed to carry any additional of the vinyl coating on the fabric top loads such as roof racks spare tires building E hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Section 7 of this manual It contains important infor mation on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pr
99. OW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the key fob for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is activated the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
100. Pure ag td 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 207 Lap Belts Gri eua treten eu P RE rper E A1 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 68 69 Lead Free Gasoline 2 0 0 cee aa dta 336 LiShtS scr REPE dead PPP A datas 95 Adbag ieee Sg ERR DAS Eat ess 60 208 Ant Lock 229 bb e a Re 208 Anti Lock Warning ssss sees 208 TEM 454 INDEX a Back Up se ee ea Sete eal GA ES 422 High Beam Indicator 000 207 Brake Assist Warning 115 214 Instrument Cluster 0 0 00 0c eee eee 97 Brake Watning 1 2454 a e be re 207 Int riof 4 32 err e REA nsere pires 95 Bulb Replacement 2004 420 Lights On Reminder 04 98 CatPO son duca scat og pue cree e ug d a e mae E 95 Low P el pe a ene gt m RR eee ee 206 Center Mounted Stop 200 423 Low Tite duse ede hd sted a gohan ye 210 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 213 Oil Pr sSufe 22 2 ee e m ina ee bs des 207 Cruise ced esed held osi d ed ces desea UP as 209 PASSING 2 astu sabe deiade ao dels 99 Daytime Running ra an a a e a 99 Rear Servicing 4 big ack e nee E 422 Dimmer Switch Headlight 98 Rear gre 422 Electronic Stability Program ESP Seat Belt Reminder 0000 207 Indicator ciere eon RRE Feed 115213214 Sentry Key ed sema zur e Us aso em ds 209 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 214 DEVI
101. R INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names m n e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension wn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multis
102. R LES MANOEUVRES ABRUPTES NE JAMAIS PLACER UN SIEGE POUR ENFANT ORIENT VERS L ARRI RE A L AVANT ET LA VITESSE EXCESSIVE oe VEHICULE PORTER TOUJOURS LES CEINTURES DE S CURIT UTILISEZ TOUJOURS LA CEINTURE DE S CURIT ET LE SYSTEME DE RETENUE POUR CONSULTER LE GUIDE DE L AUTOMOBILISTE POUR DE FANT PLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS CONSULTEZ LE GUIDE DE L AUTOMORILISTE POUR OBTENIR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES SACS GONFLABLES AUN CON SISTEMAS AVANZADOS A ADVERTENCIA DE BOLSA DE AIRE ALTO RIESGO DE A ADVERTENCIA yoicAMIENTO LA BOLSA DE AIRE PUEDE CAUSAR SERIOS DA OS O LA MUERTE A LOS NI OS EL ASIENTO DE ATRAS ES EL LUGAR MAS SEGURO PARA LOS NINOS NUNCA PONGA UN ASIENTO DE NI O CON LA CARA HACIA ATRAS EN EL ASIENTO DELANTERO SIEMPRE USE LOS CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD Y SISTEMAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA NI OS PARA MAS INFORMACION SOBRE BOLSA DE AIRE CONSULTE EL MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO EVITE MANIOBRAS ABRUPTAS Y VELOCIDAD EXCESIVA USE SIEMPRE EL CINTURON DE SEGURIDAD PARA MAYOR INFORMACION VER MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO LI 250094 8191281 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover cra
103. R VEHICLE M DOOR FRAME WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Frame Removal Two Door Models 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs two per side Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 81924c19 WARNING Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for personal injury If removed always store the door storage Store in a secure location frames outside of the vehicle 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Setthe door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over th
104. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 eee ie The door lock switch is located on each front door panel WARNING Press the switch downward to lock the doors and e For personal security reasons and safety in an upward to unlock the doors P ty y accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock sw
105. SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE wi
106. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something
107. T BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON CY e A CS OD d S UN FN AD nam LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT STEERING FLUIO AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON SRS o Cr ia AIRBAG A2 po he MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO ELECTRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM C BRAKE uA D BRAKE SYSTEM HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING CONTROL BRAKE ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DRIVE BRAKE TOW HAUL WARNING TOW F HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 8191e970 INTRODUCTION 7 8 INTRODUCTION ME WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a stamped plate located on the left
108. The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom
109. The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Blower Control ta rome a 81cab396 Temperature Control eL 81caad41 Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance mH Recirculation Control Press this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recir culation of the air inside the ve hicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recirculate mode Only use the Recirculate mode t to temporarily block out any out 81caad32 cide odors smoke or dust and to co
110. UR VEHICLE 117 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders WARNING The front cupholders are located in the center console e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power NOTE The front cupholder insert is removable for cleaning eB from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge suffi ciently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with acces sories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Front Cupholders 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Rear Cupholders STORAGE The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center Console Storage Compartment Console To lock or unlock insert ignition key and turn To open press the latch and lift cover SE Rear Cupholders Center Console ees UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Rear Storage Co
111. VEHICLE ME Also the rear cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing When a door is open and the interior lights are on the lens Press the lens again to turn it off rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery 81913177 Cargo Lamp Rear Cargo Lamp Four Door Models es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light Multifunction Control Lever The multifunction control lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The lever is located on the left side of the steering column Multifunction Control Lever Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end of the multifunction control lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headligh
112. acement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 328 STARTIN
113. ach listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE
114. addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or leasee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used i
115. ads HOT e On the highways Slow down H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner service is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system e Incity traffic While stopped shift transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoi
116. am age the windows FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located Integrated Power Module TIPM in the engine compartment near the battery This center Cavity Cartridge Mini Description contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label Fuse Fuse that identifies each component is printed on the inside of jl the cover J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module Pink B 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD Main J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window De Natural Green fogger J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Green ABS Pump Feed ESP Pink J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Pink ABS Valve Feed ESP Green J8 J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Feed Yellow Module PCM Trans Green Flex Fuel Range J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Relay J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Pink Manifold Tuning Valve Yellow J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink Pink es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini D
117. amage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are mounted in the front and the rear Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 8L 0 378 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 379 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 380 lll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs s2 ezxza4hsgebegskb Rh x m d x pe pee 380 E Replacement Parts 52s s raras 382 Bl Authorized Dealer Service 382 Bl Maintenance Procedures 0 383 Engine Oll ieu edd em e kx cete Gates 383 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 386
118. and a single chime will sound 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT Q activated 7 Seat Belt Indicator Light A warning chime and an indicator light will alert you to buckle the seat belts When the belt is buckled the chime will stop but the light will stay on until it times out about six seconds 8 Turn Signal Indicator Lights The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mi 2 km 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on have the system checked by your autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 If the warning light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED Also a single chime will sound 10 High Beam Indicator Light D This light shows that the headlights are on high 777 beam Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is ope
119. ange only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 NOTE Towing coasting or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual OVERDRIVE For most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled 4th gear Overdrive and will automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e The shift lever is in DRIVE e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Overdrive Off Switch 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console The O D OFF indicator light on the switch will illuminate to show that the switch has
120. ank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ign
121. ansfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal 272 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure 80e54ed7 Ignition Key Positions Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 If Engine Fails to Start Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to
122. atch engages fully es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Front Seatback Recline The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using To recline the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat Push downward on the handle to lower the seat 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Recline Lever Seat Height Adjustment bi m 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Front Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Push the lever on the seatback rearward toward the rear of the vehicle to tilt the entire seat forward Easy Entry Seat 1 To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks Easy Entry Lever 2 Push the seat rearward until the track locks es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE The front seats have a full recliner memory which will allow the seatback to be returned to its original position NOTE The front seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position NOTE The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce t
123. ause damage or injury All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 310 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal During off road use loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restore Anti Lock Brake System function WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible WARNING e Anti Lock Brake Systems ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking o
124. ay contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 7 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containi
125. be ajar gATE if the swing gate is open or ajar gASCAP which indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged CHANgE OIL indicates that the engine oil should be changed ESPOFF indicates that ESP is turned off and noFUSE indicates that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power Mod ule will display in the odometer Change Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when y
126. been activated When the indicator light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins from a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise damage to steering column or shift lever could result Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac tices can overheat and damage the transmission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result es STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response durin
127. ber will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With RER REN Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will be displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions
128. brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control eo under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slippi
129. bs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ibs 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 320 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib rr Occupant 3 160 Ibs 3 865 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOT
130. by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 NOTE The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle
131. c0715e FULL RANGE MARK 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for recommended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity 3 8L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirement
132. c3 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to 20 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the brake lamp Gently slide the side bows off the door frame strap around the side bows and through the slot on the track and lower the top down into the vehicle body e 19 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the 21 Close the front header latches bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 22 Remove door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 4 Bow 5 Sail Panel 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 11 Plastic Retainer ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames
133. cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for more information CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When mm towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 354 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the cha
134. ce more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function a TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Rec
135. chrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443 All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart signifi cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or
136. cident Weight Distributing Hitch Systems may not be com patible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION mem Weight Distributing Hitch System 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 4WD Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GTW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt
137. ck airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that 81915f2a 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix te Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE
138. come familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle en INTRODUCTION 5 NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicl
139. compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Compass Calibration The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates the need for operator intervention under normal condi tions If the CAL indicator is lit the compass needs to be calibrated A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free of large metal objects such as large buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel above the radio This is where the compass sensor is located Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions During a short initial period the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished After initial calibration the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the ve hicle is in
140. connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 If the seat belt has an automatic
141. d conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that w
142. d restraint Refer to Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Airbag System Components The airbag system co
143. d Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS a Mirrors sooo SPORE RERO 83 Inside Day Night Mirror 83 Outside Mirrors llle 84 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect 85 ESTERI EIE T TE E LL cone 86 Front Seat Adjustment llle 86 Manual Seat Height Adjustment lf Equipped i229 93 Rr mes 87 Front Seatback Recline llle 87 Front Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Head Restraints 4 06 293665446 eR A 89 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models lle esse 89 Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models l l 91 Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models llle esse 92 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat
144. d ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment Refer to Storage in Section 3 of this manual Jack Storage en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 Spare Tire Stowage To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking Park on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and shift automatic transmission into PARK or manual transmission into REVERSE Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the hazard warning flashers Refer to Hazard Warning Flashers in this section e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel BLOCK e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Instructions que T Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
145. d only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momen tarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP Off 4H Range Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running In this mode all ESP a
146. dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the Maintenance Schedule the condition of all the belts and tensioner should be checked Refer to Section 8 of this manual Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no inter ference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the mileage specified in the Maintenance Sched ule Refer to Section 8 of this manual The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for spark plug information Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can res
147. dents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as WARNING the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and personal injury off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind or folded down shield down Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If securely fastened either up or down you choose to remove the doors see your authorized Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all dealer
148. ds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H Em speeds 1102 2t03 3to4 4t05 5t06 gine 3 8L Accel 15 24 24 34 47 56 39 55 76 90 Cruise 10 16 19 27 37 41 31 43 60 66 Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is depressed 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is depressed Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selec 6 to 5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2to
149. e letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 314 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in en STARTING AND OPERATING 315 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions T
150. e Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reac tivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Tu
151. e after your manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your vehicle Your authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your authorized dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash o
152. e airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Enhanced Accident Response Feature Maintaining Your Airbag System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with WARNING power door locks will unlock automatically The hazard lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine Modifications to any part of the airbag system In addition after the vehicle has stopped moving the could cause it to fail when you need it You could interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain be injured if the airbag system is not there to lit until the ignition switch is turned off protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is upper right side of the instrument panel Do not driven modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 60 THINGS
153. e channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down and Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed before zipping to prevent damage ae 81926506 17 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 20 Open the doors and insert the roof retainers into the swing gate brackets channels above the door starting at the front and work ing rearward 81926539 19 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the 5 rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to sail panel retainers into the body side channel their secured position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To Open 1 Insert finger behind the plastic retainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Re
154. e ee 98 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 000 eee 49 Remote Control Door LOCKS jc debe exe br one saan 19 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Starting System llle 25 Replacement Bulbs see ie ck rx em es 420 Replacement Keys i e rds ER anb 2 16 Replacement Parts 22er e Lee es s 382 Replacement Tires llle 327 Reporting Safety Defects liiis 440 Restraint Head llle 89 40 458 INDEX MMM Restraints Child eese 62 67 Restraints Occupant 6 0 0 eee eee 40 Roll Over Warning 1 0 0 0 00 e eee eee 5 Rotation Tires oso 0 0 ee 329 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 76 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 77 Safety Defects Reporting 440 Safety Information Tire 04 313 Safety PS rug 4 ais esed ae Ma loa ba 75 Satellite Radio 0 0000 250 251 253 Satellite Radio Antenna 05 255 Schedule Maintenance 0000 428 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 0 eee 49 Seat Belts llle 41 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 47 And Pregnant Women 0000 50 Child Restraint 542222 re eS 62 72 Extender 2 uu duet dr E dria dae 50 Front Seat ig id Ress e Rb RU EA 41 Maintenance peas doas eU de ew REOR SUR See a 411 Pretensioners llle 48 R minder 23 d e Rae eG 207 Deals uashcu etwa pardo wea Wiehe Le eg Es 86 Adjustm
155. e for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and is inter ested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturn ing any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use standard seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to a greater risk of being thrown out of an open body vehicle than out of a closed vehicle in an accident which can result in injury or death Although your vehicle may be equipped with a soft top or optional hard top to give the occupants protection from the weather these tops do not offer structural protection i
156. e metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both Door Frame Removal Four Door Models knobs Repeat on ihe other side 1 Unscrew and remove the two forward most door frame attachment knobs 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the front door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your front hand to remove the frame from the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 4 Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame at 5 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the tachment knob on the rear door frame upper front of the rear door frame Pull the frame towards you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for WARNING storage Store in a secure location e Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle Door Frame Installati
157. e or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted in the fuel tank may be necessary es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for EOIN SY recommended engine air cleaner filter change intervals Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless CAUTION it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle wi
158. e pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM System will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible chec
159. e rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 11 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior 12 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 14 To install the side windows affix the window tem side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm towards the porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the upper rear rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm rear roof bow 4 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 15 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 16 Continue closing the zipper only along the top edge of the window 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velc
160. e services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHANgE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is neces sary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 mi 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 e Change your en
161. e to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchora
162. ed emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing
163. ed to a non modified production vehicle depending on lift size tire size suspension changes and or driving habits If early ESP activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle the additional ability to permanently turn off ESP is available A steering wheel ESP button 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME maneuver must be performed to permanently disable ESP and defeat the functionality of the ESP switch Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal ESP operation and restore ESP switch functionality al lowing ESP Partial or Off modes WARNING With ESP in the permanent disable mode enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESP and ERM sys tems is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability This disabled mode is intended for off highway or off road use only Ve hicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicle in the ESP disabled mode will seriously affect the vehicles roadworthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control and or accident resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries The following procedure will disable or re enable ESP functionality in the vehicle 1 Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position 2 Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead 3 Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON 4 Wait approximately
164. ed to the OFF position REAR AXLE LOCK 4WD NON RUBICON MODELS IF EQUIPPED The REAR AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the REAR AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the switch up to unlock the rear axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the electronic control SWAY BAR switch located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Sway Bar Switch Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 2
165. en for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 0 000 000 KR58S120123 Canada 26 44 64 oeir atoa ooo ee PES 2671 S120123 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800diab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasoline and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms
166. ent eese 86 Cleaning isses one each 6 ate e er va d 409 Easy ENEY 5b hasgme d eec qb RS e 88 Fold and Tumble Rear 0 4 89 Head Restraints 0 0 0 eee eee eee 89 Height Adjustment 0 00 87 Rear Folding s csse a LER aden oa ie os 92 Removal 0 0 00 ee ees 91 92 Seatback Release oc 1 1 eee ee ai 87 TIGNE i hss Soe ce tite OA Boe Se iy eite t drew ale ee 87 security Against Theft 234 944 404 tas8G4 ood 18 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Oil uuu uc bd eae eh ee ed 384 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 en INDEX 459 Sentry Key Programming 005 16 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance 0 eee eee 437 Service Contract ee ee eee 439 Service Manuals lees 441 Setting the Clock 0 224 236 251 Shift Lock Manual Override 280 Shifting so evan ead aos i ee eae s 279 Automatic Transmission ln 281 Manual Transmission 275 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 47 Shoulder Belts 0 0 cece eee eae 41 Side Airbag c edd ee Gee dene exe 57 Signals Tutti 2 es 40206 kr eyes 99 207 421 422 Snow Chains Tire Chains 329 SOM TOP isis d ei EE dae Pee eas 141 168 Sound Systems Radio 04 250 Spare te creses eria esie Beak ea ed edes 367 Spark PIugs sens queden aha
167. er latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 8 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 9 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow 10 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm towards the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 11 To install the side windows affix the window tem 12 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 Continue closing the zipper only along the top edge 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the of the window window into the bottom sid
168. er window switches remain active for two minutes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Rear Power Windows Four Door Models Only The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word gATE as an indica tion of when the swing gate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the swing gate is not completely closed the VF display will show the word GATE If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip
169. es adai n emaa adaa a eee 443 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 0005 444 Quality Grades 5 04600 eoe eme 442 Treadwear nequa S Ve E dO 443 es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an author
170. escription Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Yellow Yellow J22 Spare M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow Equipped Blue Stop Light CHMSL M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Switch Stop Lamp Feed Yellow Vehicle Entertainment M2 20 Amp Relay Trailer Lighting System IOD VES Sat Yellow _ Stop ellite Digital Audio Re M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Locker ceiver SDARS DVD Yellow Relay Hands Free Module HFM RADIO An M4 tenna ANT Universal M5 Garage Door Opener M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain UGDO Vanity Lamp Yellow Sensor VANITY LP M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Yellow BATT ACC SELECT 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS Red IOD HVAC ATC MW Yellow Heater Ventilation Air SENSR Underhood Conditioning Lamp UH LMP Automatic Temperature M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP Control HVAC ATC Green Rear View Mirror RR M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw i MIR a o Yellow Cabin Compartment partment Node CON Node IOD CCN Transfer Case Switch Wireless Control Mod CEASE SW BUNT ule WCM SIREN Multi Function Control Multifunction Control 2 e s mo MOEN Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW M14 20 Amp Tra
171. ess the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK Automatic Transmission with Overdrive Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range 282 STARTING AND OPERATING EE PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this r
172. essened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heater Only The controls for the heating ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular g1915 22 mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode Panel gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet M
173. ession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMaA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency KHz 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 BREN OS XP 96 60 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEGO Audio poids 46 442 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 WMA Specifica tion WMA Sampling Fre quency kHz 44 1 and 48 Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported
174. etter engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips O D Off To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing select the O D OFF feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONE ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmiss
175. f Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result
176. f personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Serv
177. f the vehicle 81931056 7 Disconnect the rear window washer hose and install the tethered cap CAUTION Make sure storage cap is installed to prevent foreign materials from entering washer tube and clogging system and also to prevent fluid from being sprayed into the rear of the vehicle 8 Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected from the hard top ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if m necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order NOTE The hard top must be positioned properly to ail ensure sealing Also make sure that the hard top is sitting 9 Close the swing gate flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that 10 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place on a soft there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top surface to prevent damage 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU
178. facturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shou
179. g normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC OR ROCK TRAC IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions 2H Two wheel drive high range 4H Four wheel drive high range N Neutral and 4L Four wheel drive low range 4WD Shift Controls The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and 286 STARTING AND OPERATING EE rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
180. ge System in this section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Improper installation can lead to failure of an will use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s collision The child could be badly injured or weight and height Check the label on the restraint for killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex weight and height limits actly when installing an infant or child restraint e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se e All seating positions except for driver have a auto vere or fatal injury to the infant matic locking retractor identified by a distinctive label The seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not Here are some tips for getting
181. gine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 mi 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Odometer Trip Odometer in the In strument Cluster Description section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME At Each Oil Change CAUTION e Change the engine oil filter gt Z Failure to perform the required maintenance items
182. has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate ea RND SINGLE DISC gt MP3 PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME Lord TUNE SCROLL 81c7c564 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass sta
183. he accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Seiting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to
184. he hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the righ
185. he maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and osted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufac
186. he program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbut
187. he risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The front head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button The rear head restraints are not adjustable Adjustable Head Restraints Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold seatback for ward Folding Rear Seat 3 When completed return the seat to its normal posi tion 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and firmly lock seat into position Rear Seat Release 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models 1 Remove the three rear subwoofer if equipped mounting screws using a 130 Torx head driver WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
188. he spare tire 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate 4 Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 8 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 8 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 13 Quarts 12 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Spark Plugs 3 8L Engine RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Oil Filter 3 8L Engine MOPARS Oil Filter P N 04105409AC Fuel Selection 87 Octane 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Trans
189. he window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 10 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 11 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage 13 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 14 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 15 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form the header on top of the rear portion of the deck a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 16 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 17 Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to the door frame track to the rear door frame disengage Repeat this step on the other side 81926d
190. heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days MANUAL TRANSMISSION WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal 1 3 5 2 4 6 R Shift Pattern 81cd6226 Shifting Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle spee
191. heel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument 3o cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac
192. hicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not WARNING spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear replaced in two or more adjacent grooves the tire should be amp replaced Many states have laws requiring tire repl
193. hicles and other objects seen in the right side overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Outside Rearview Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect This feature is not available on two door or four door models te RND MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 81969789 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone When you press this button a Not Equipped with UConnect message will display on your radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone Ee When you press this button a Not Equipped with UConnect message will display on your radio screen 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME SEATS WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Move seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever Be Manual Seat Adjustment sure the l
194. ial to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Se An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is WARNING required when towing a trailer with electronically i actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 when you need them and could have an accident Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis Ibs 907 kg tance When towing you should allow for additional CAUTIONI space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring should be of
195. ice Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator brake ro tors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be
196. ich ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage CAUTION Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach
197. iction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars It is typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements en STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an ac
198. id from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication All driveline and steering components are sealed and do not require lubrication Driveshafts are not serviceable Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges
199. il EUROPE ity Program ESP Stop M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con Lamp Switch STP LP _ Red troller NGC Global SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Powertrain Engine Control Controller GPEC M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK ASST Natural LOCK UNLOCK Red Heater Ventilation Air MTRS Conditioning Module HVAC MOD Headlamp Wash HDLP WASH Compass COMPAS es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 VEHICLE STORAGE 1 CAUTION If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 e When installing the Integrated Power Module days you may want to take steps to protect your battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 0Y may erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so e Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the rmm e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of load If a properly rated fuse c
200. iler Tow Export PLG MOD Export Yellow Only Diesel Only es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT HORN Red Controller ORC Red HI LOW M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Park M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Blue Lamp LT TAIL LIC Red HI LOW PRK LMP M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run Natural WIPER Blue Lamp RT TAIL PRK M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Jf RUN ELMP Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD Pump DSL LIFT Natural 1 and 2 PUMP Export Only M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment M26 Blue Node Interior Light M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed CCN INT LIGHT Red Wireless Module oi Dani ene M28 10 Amp PCM Feed TCM BANK Red M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD M29 n Yellow 3 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M30 15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt J1962 M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Blue Diagnostic Feed Red M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps B U M36 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow LAMPS Yellow M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Red Controller ORC TT Red ABS Electronic Stab
201. ill not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Install chains on rear tires only Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and excessive tire and chain wear e Use chains on P225 75R16 tires only P245 75R16 P255 75R17 P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only e Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer e Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains e Install chains snugly and tighten after 0 6 mi 1 km of driving e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h e Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and cont
202. ing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default aud
203. ing goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into 1st gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water inges tion EN STARTING AND OPERATING 305 CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding
204. ing has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tam pering ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the system You may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 8163e6a8 Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the panic alarm from a maxi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a hand held radio transmitter key fob The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked
205. ins under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmission shift the transmis sion into 1st gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR en STARTING AND OPERATING 355 2 GTW 3 GAWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual for the proper 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized inspection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section for proper tire replacement proce dures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essent
206. inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one anothe
207. io language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under A this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have
208. ion or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear drive shaft is removed See your authorized dealer or refer to the Service Manual Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage 360 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Towing 4WD Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral for recreational towing Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Shift automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 3 Shift transfer case lever into N Neutral 4 Start engine 5 Shift automatic transmission into DRIVE or manual transmission into gear 6 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 7 Shut the engine off and place the ignition key into the ACC position 8 Shift automatic transmission into PARK 9 Apply parking brake 10 Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 11 Release parking brake 12 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post
209. ire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of this manual Refer to Vehicle Loading in this section NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing Refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 I
210. ire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path wh
211. ise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION ney 95HY 7M Ia e A MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY MR STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e l Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 313 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for th
212. it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 CAUTION accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to
213. itch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position m 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located
214. ition and turn the wheel slightly to the left or right to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone u
215. ition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visible signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeatedly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors igni tion after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light located on the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the system you will need to press the UN LOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If someth
216. ix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost GH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Blower Control Use this control center rotary knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control right rotary knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially blo
217. ized dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your authorized selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians 438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE x special tools and the latest information to ensure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 0510
218. k the 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Se inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle wi
219. kets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket 4 Using a rubber mallet carefully tap the knuckles from screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a T30 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa tion later in this section Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
220. l in this section for proper or extended use of this position Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially
221. l tion Maxi 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 mum Speed Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Depress the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into RE VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal ing precautions are not observed the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to
222. lder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint
223. ler towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and Safety Information section in this manual should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers en STARTING AND OPERATING 353 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
224. ll still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning thresh old en STARTING AND OPERATING 335 NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driv
225. ll display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type ico d No program type or Picea None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Program Type ae o adi Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 16 Digit Cha
226. lop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Placard Location Two Door Models ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always mm cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at sure molded into the tire side wall least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Tire Placard Location Four Door Models Check tire
227. luding the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 24 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so the correct mileage can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door indicates that a door s may
228. m 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton 4 with the corresponding number 1 6 where the 777 CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio to the Radio mode es UNDERSTANDING YOU
229. m h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle To Open 1 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side NOTE All plastic retainers must be removed from the door rail prior to the operation of the Sunrider UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift 5 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the top the header on top of the rear portion of the deck es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 6 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form 7 Close the front header latches a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds Ensure that the straps are securely stowed 8 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle To Close Perform the above steps in the opposite order 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any additio
230. mission MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the require ments of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 198 RBI Model 35 and 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubri cant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emissions Control System Maintenance 428 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 428 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenanc
231. motion Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compass calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the PARK position if equipped If the compass seems in error or erratic you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass you must first enter the variance mode Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the vari ance mode and release the button when the VAR Com pass Variance symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed Once in the variance mode it is necessary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking Manual compass calibra tion has been initiated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct head ings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in an other area Compass Variance VAR Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North For proper compass function the correct variance zone must be set Se
232. mpariment The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage com partment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on loop and twist 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in tray 81919432 3 Open rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps If Equipped e Two rear swing gate brac
233. mum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the pre scribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 mi 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level o
234. n and the headlights or park lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 11 Brake Warning Light After the ignition is turned on this light illumi nates to indicate function check at vehicle start up It also indicates if the parking brake is applied If the light stays on when the parking brake is BRAKE 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se off it indicates a possible brake system fluid leak or low pressure level see your authorized dealer immediately If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is in motion the Brake Warning Light will flash and a chime will sound The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 12 Anti Lock ABS Warning Light After the ignition is turned on this light illumi nates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see yo
235. n both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated positio
236. n by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of antifreeze coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill The cooling system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Discard old antifreeze coolant solution according to rec ommended procedure Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for correct antifree
237. n control sys e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near tem could result from using an improper fuel cap the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities tank filled into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on CAUTION NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top tightened off the fuel tank after filling If the gas cap is not tightened properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the tightened every time the vehicle is refueled fuel tank is full 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label c
238. n could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light Resolving the problem will turn the Malfunction Indicator Light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functio
239. n defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle e Seat belt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn siz
240. n the event of an accident and do not change the open body characteristic of the vehicle Even though your vehicle has a sport bar and side bars for some extra protection it is a truly open vehicle there is no structural integrated top and it has low sides and a folding wind shield Many of these vehicles do not have fully enclosed hard doors 6 INTRODUCTION Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and serious injury or death Because of its open body construction your vehicle offers less protection than closed vehicles in the event of an accident A WARNING A WARNING AVOID ABRUPT MANEUVERS AND EXCESSIVE SPEED ALWAYS BUCKLE UP SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION PLUS GRAND RISQUE A MISE EN GARDE PLUS SRAND RIS EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS HIGHER ROLLOVER CHILDREN CAN BE KILLED OR SERIOUSLY INJURED BY THE AIR BAG THE BACK SEAT IS THE SAFEST PLACE FOR CHILDREN NEVER PUT A REAR FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT ALWAYS USE SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT AIR BAGS MEME AVEC DES SACS A MISE EN GARDE GONFLABLES PERFECTIONNES LES ENFANTS PEUVENT ETRE TU S OU GRAVEMENT BLESSES PAR UN SAC GONFLABLE LA BANQUETTE ARRI RE EST LA PLACE LA PLUS S CURITAIRE POUR LES ENFANTS S EVITE
241. nal loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Win dow and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Section 7 of this manual It contains important informa tion on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric t
242. nd TCS stability features are turned off except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Refer to Compass and Mini Trip Computer If Equipped in Section 4 of this manual To turn ESP on 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP system will change to Partial Off mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range AWD Models ESP Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equip
243. nd a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 4 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops 5 Open the swing gate on the windshield frame 6 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets 81b34aa7 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 81925332 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip t
244. ng MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold
245. ng wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing roa
246. ngine is running smoothly 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death en STARTING AND OPERATING 275 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block
247. ning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M
248. ns as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately
249. nsists of the following Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Remote Side Equipped Impact Acceleration Sensors If e Driver Seat Track Position Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning e Light for six to eight seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turn
250. nual 3 21 4 Door Sahara 5 277 lbs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 lbs Model 2WD 2 394 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 45 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door Sahara 7 777 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Model 2WD 3 527 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door Sahara 7 803 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Model 2WD 3 539 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door X 5 325 lbs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs Model 4WD 2 415 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 45 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door X 7 825 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Model 4WD 8 549 kg 2 97 sq m 1587 kg 159 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X 7 825 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Model 4WD 3 549 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 4 Door Sahara 5 481 Ibs 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs Model 4WD 2 486 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 45 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 4 Door Sahara 7 981 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Model 4WD 3 620 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door Sahara 8 027 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic Model 4WD 3 641 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 3 8L Manual 4 10 4 Door Rubi 8 059 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs con Model 3 655 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 4WD 3 8L 4 10 4 Door Rubi 8 104 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs Automatic con Model 3 676 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 159 kg 4WD Refer to local laws for maximum trai
251. odify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out Four Door Models Only This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seatback is fully latched e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
252. odometer mileage The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key remote keyless entry RKE key fob or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and Gate Handle your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting to close the swing gate hard top models only 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side airbags if equipped for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information
253. of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended visco
254. of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Windshield And Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer sol
255. ognition System VR in Section 3 For UConnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER Multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player navigation system CD DVD player USB port
256. ol the interior rapidly upon ini tial start up in very hot or humid weather 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum de fogging select the Outside Air position NOTE The Recirculate mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Normal Operation Press this button to engage the air conditioning A lamp will illumi nate when the air conditioning system is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera Sicaad38 ture control to achieve your de sired interior temperature NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 MAX A C For maximum cooling select ei ther the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Then press the A C and the Recir culate buttons so that both lamps are illuminated and set the tem perature control to its coolest set a 81cab384 ting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e Refer to Recirculation Contro
257. on Four Door Models 1 Install the rear door frame first 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 81924c19 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield Then clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the front of the rear door frame 6 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 7 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will CAUTI
258. on on the instrument cluster to access the computer displays Press and hold the left button on the instrument cluster for two to three seconds to switch from English to Metric displays Reset Press and hold the right button on the instrument cluster while function is being displayed to reset The following trip conditions can be reset e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa tion Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight
259. on the instru ment panel center stack below the radio The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window four door models and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window four door models The switches will continue to function for up to two minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a front door is opened Power Window Switches Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models Only The window lockout switch located between the win dow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The pow
260. onditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled flu
261. ons 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimun tire lift provides maximum stability 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position spare wheel tire on vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten nuts clockwise To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove jack assembly and wheel blocks WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided
262. ont seat to its mid track position Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and pull 1 towania Yon atil Di Seaia Teleares positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Pull Strap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To Raise the Rear Seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 1 Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference To open Mehood deen ape Dota aod Jatehes from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt please make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into 818f406e position If the seatback in not securely locked into Hood Latch position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperl
263. ontains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded es STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle
264. ontinues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS IF EQUIPPED Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Light 658 Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 Heater Control Lights 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Light Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe iio Soundbar Dome Light rr sorcerer munnin 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights 2 sse ir neiti ec ers 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light 1 L E D Fog Lights aso qup eer beds 9145 Front Park Tum Lights 2 3157 Front Side Marker Lights 2 168 Ficadlishts 2 toa acs phe eer e oe tees H13 Stop Tail Turn Lights 2 3157 Underhood Light 5 000000 561 License Light cepas fet dad ot RE ERES 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo
265. ood traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock 304 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible man ner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if some th
266. op Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up unless side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the ve hicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 4 Bow 5 Sail Panel 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 11 Plastic Retainer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution a
267. orce in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or m
268. osed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including gATE gAS CAP noFUSE CHANgE OIL or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur one chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and console storage 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Manual Door Locks The front two door models and rear doors four door models are equipped with a rocker type interior door e For personal security reasons and safety in an lock To lock the door when leaving your vehicle press accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as the Lock postion and dose ihe HOOP well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Door Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
269. ou WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines 80
270. ou start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic C System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the Malfunction Indicator Light may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
271. ous gases could be drawn into the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e On hardtop models keep the tailgate window closed when driving your vehicle On fabric top models do not drive with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also open This will prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a indicator check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the indicator is not lit during starting have it serviced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Safety Checks You Shoul
272. ove the key wawmc Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 1 Place the shift lever in the PARK position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position CAUTION Ignition Key Positions An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves 3 Push the ignition key inward Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key STEERING WHEEL LOCK Your vehicle is equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ign
273. ow the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF onl
274. ower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the key fob buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the trans mitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components g Separating RKE Key Fob Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182c72 3 To reassemble the key fob case snap the two halves together es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system automatic transmission models only which will allow the vehicle to be started from distances up to approximately 300 ft 91 m away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood swing gate and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the
275. p through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 3 Attach front of side bar to windshield frame 1 Raise the windshield e Install top two hex bolts 13 mm first then lower side hex bolt 13 mm Lower side bolt will not align until top two bolts are installed 2 Loosely attach rear of side bar to sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section 819292b7 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts e Reattach sport bar Velcro covering es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of E the switch up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three time
276. panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Front Panel s Installation Only With Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn left and right panels over and move spacer block located on rear of panel upward 90 degrees NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install right panel first then the left panel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 3 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near top of door using a 40 Torx head driver 4 Door Only 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver 5 Open swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift rear window glass 81947257 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Locate the wiring harness on the left rear inside corner o
277. peat this on the other side SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 4 Slide the plastic sleeve forward 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 81925914 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 5 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the 6 Locate straps to secure side bows Wrap straps around material is folded back as shown bows as shown Repeat on the other side NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels 7 Reposition sun visors 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Close 1 Remove straps from side bows 2 Unclip and move sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull to the front of the vehicle 4 Hook header latches to the loops on the windshield frame close latches and return sun visor s to their original position 5 Slide plastic sleeve rearward over Sunrider link 6 Tuck drip rail retainers into door frame slots SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 k
278. ped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESP system will be in this mode In 4L range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 48 km h At es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In 40 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 40 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 48 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will al ways be illuminated in 4L range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only Disabling ESP for Modified Vehicles AWD Models Only Vehicles modified with larger tires and or suspension lifts may experience early ESP activations as compar
279. pos ete br sence ws 359 Weight skr n eR igts 348 Trac Lok Rear Axle 1 0 00 eee eee eee 289 Traction Contro cer RR 106 Traction Control Light 00 213 Trailer Towing iae dokn Reb Rs 344 Cooling System Tips 0000 359 Hitches ise e ERR ME YES 336 348 Minimum Requirements 05 353 Trailer and Tongue Weight 352 WIKING acea does ick was EROR dera ER Rar aS 356 Trailer Towing Guide 0005 348 Trailer Weight iom ene ed see PES 348 Transfer Case ose cd m eR EET as 404 Four Wheel Drive Operation 285 Maintenance n eu aagi ed un Ta aaea E 404 Transmission Automatie iet ex vua a a UR DAR eos 281 Maintenance llle 401 403 Manual cseseccs ee pe E ee E nia 275 Range Indicator 0000 00000 210 SHINE us eoa gom a a ar a d 279 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 24 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 0 4 22 Transporting Pets 6i Reed 74 Tread Wear Indicators 462 INDEX ee Trip COnDYDULeE 2 x a de ene Res 215 Trp Odom tetr o eR recte Re eG 211 Trip Odometer Reset Button 210 Turn Signals i Loeb RE 99 207 421 422 UConnect Hands Free Phone 85 250 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 442 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 250 Upholstery Care zs eme RR 409 USB Poft 5 x252uonsres RE ERO
280. r badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous NOTE The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on until the driver s seat belt is buckled Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the f
281. r cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 441 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address i
282. r on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue It typically provides adjustable fr
283. r steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents POWER STEERING The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must The standard power steering system will give you good never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability or the safety of others steering capability if power assist is lost 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make no
284. r under the multifunction control lever and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 4 818f547e Speed Control Switches To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control System on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release t
285. racter Dis Program Type 8 play Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between ie Il playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly press
286. rees fahrenheit and on Canadian vehicles in degrees centigrade 19 Cruise Indicator Light cruise This light shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 20 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 21 OdometerlTrip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pre
287. res and is very difficult to get through You should use 2nd gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic trans mission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and han dling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pave ment or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced t
288. ribute to a smooth quiet ride 330 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EJ E FRONT Eoo cXERS 80316864 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mi 1 km after a three hour period Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls bel
289. rizontally when removing CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping 5 Remove side bar assembly and reattach sport bar Velcro covering 6 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 7 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store in center console or securely behind the rear seat 8 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 181929337 9 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers 10 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch stra
290. rn the ignition key to the ACC RUN position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reac tivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender
291. ro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 18 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed am es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 19 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 21 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 22 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel 20 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 23 Open the doors and insert the top retainers into the 24 Ensure plastic retainer is tucked in properly at channels in the door frame above the doors starting at B pillar not pinching the seal the front and working toward the rear of the vehicle 81926539 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 25 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position 191 FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some acci
292. rporation AR 81 326 0855 Second Edition Printed in U S A
293. s before returning to the set position 6 Reinstall wiper arms 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The pushbutton is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An amber light shows that the defroster is on N 819179d2 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten CAUTION minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the eee Use care when washing the inside of the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the hea
294. s Seat sou REPRE IG Grease 41 Body Mechanism Lubrication 392 Brake Assist System 0000 00 00 eee 107 Brake Assist Warning Light 214 Brake Control System Electronic 105 Brake System scs ema hee SERE EE 399 Anti Lock ABS 2 ceu iR 105 309 FOSES ost aie ta ha Re ku PEN d e 400 Master Cylinder cssc RR ek 400 Parking kx bebe Ee as 308 Warning Light xke doe RR eb Res 207 Brake Transmission Interlock 281 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Bulb Replacement 03454 kd eoe exe 420 Capacities Fluid isis 8200 04 RES 424 Caps Filler a Em 340 Power Steering 6 eee eee eee 391 Car Washes ec soit ym gd bee e dere qub T Pes 407 Carbon Monoxide Warning 339 Cargo Light siran casa eek ep eaten deka be 95 Cargo Vehicle Loading 342 Catalytic Converter 1 0 llle 386 Caution Exhaust Gas 0 0 0 0 0 08 eee 75 CD Compact Disc Player 250 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 258 Cellular PHONE s eicere kxxeer ERR 85 250 251 258 Center High Mounted Stop Light 423 Certification Label cg heat dugi EEEE aes 342 Chains Dre xau 95 to Pes 3redoedi dede ee 329 Changing A Flat Tire 448 INDEX a Charging System Light 0 206 Chart Tire Sizing i ossi exer S doe 314 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 213 380 Child Re
295. s distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner s Manual concern ing vehicles used for trailer towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in o
296. s are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized
297. s described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e e meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Latch Anchorages Two Door Models Latch Anchorages Four Door Models ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models B Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or
298. s on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked immediately e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
299. s required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts 442 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimler
300. sail panel retainers from the body 11 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage 13 Completely release the latches from the loops on the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with the Sunrider package proceed to Step 16 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 14 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid forward over 15 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider the Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only Models Only 81c65d28 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 16 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted When the top is completely down position the drip rails brake lamp Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the so they make a v shape this prevents damage to the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it soft top material toward the rear of the vehicle
301. sed an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended
302. sh an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seal belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual qo Xxx gi 1m me DoF aj amp c WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET LOW PEDALS ES S ya rey a 9 2 y N z gt t FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR ENS ane yt lt m asi OG s Cv FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL w Oy ve Gt CX S A WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL fin i 3 i e Ll bt VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEA
303. sh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface
304. shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or de press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have an injury accident Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the
305. sity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short time adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside the vehicle Otherwise poison
306. spension tie rod ends and boot E seals replace if necessary 24 000 40 000 24 E Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 E Change the manual transmission fluid if using your M vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow H n plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service 30 000 50 000 30 D commercial service off road desert operation or Tl more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high IM speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 3 Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 50 000 30 8 Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the follow 60 000 100 000 60 ing police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage N are listed follow the interval that occurs first T Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for A any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 C quent trailer towing E Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 S Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 C Replace the ignition cables 102 000 170 000 102 d Replace the spark plugs 102 000 170 000 102 D Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s 120 000 200 000 120 Replace accessory drive belt s
307. spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Head Light 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
308. sseeeteect ese ERIS 311 B Tire Safety Information sse I m RR 313 Tire Markings eee 313 Tire Identification Number TIN 316 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 317 Bl Tires General Information 321 Tire Pressures si kh E 321 Tire Inflation Pressures 322 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 324 Radial Ply Tires llle 325 Tire SPINNING o eer em eb Aas 325 Tread Wear Indicators 00 326 Lite Of Dre amp 2erseM b Re EE e 326 Replacement Tites iac eer n m es 327 Alignment And Balance 328 la lie Chains us redit np s 329 EN STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations 329 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 330 Base System ees 333 General Information 335 Mi Fuel Requirements 2er mnn 336 Reformulated Gasoline 336 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 337 B MMT In Gasoline 00200000 337 Materials Added To Fuel 338 Fuel System Cautions 04 338 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 339 B Adding Fuel cae ou coh tee eee ENTIER 340 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 340 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Se
309. ssure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons inc
310. st The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES REQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID num
311. station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against y
312. ster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out or towing the battery vent Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery could cause the batisty to explode explosion During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 3 D
313. straint ue Rem ars 62 63 69 72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 68 69 Child Seat ui deles vd boas 2 fag ee pad be 67 Climate Control srs 0 lle 259 Clock nose coh dd Base ae TU i 224 236 251 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 258 COMPASS s cse pes e RPPERERC RTT ROSCRE 215 Compass Calibration sisate paeen a eiea 217 Computer Trip Travel 040 215 Console 2c etr Seed eG bbe ws 118 Console Floor llle 118 Contract Service v s iesadezcctiesshedehies 439 Converter Catalytic sec eae shagan aaea esi Es 386 Cooling System dpa d ee d ea PAGS 394 Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Capacity iia a iera eted 424 Coolant Level llle 397 Disposal of Used Coolant 397 Drain Flush and Refill 0 395 Inspection a cule an ex Re xU E ae dois 394 Points to Remember 0 000000 398 Pressure Cap iie e gad ea singer tari 396 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 395 424 Temperature Gauge 0 0 0 0 eee 209 Corrosion Protection 000002 eee 406 Crankcase Emission Control System 388 Cruise Light 2 03 cee ewe e Ea 209 Cup Holder sssi dark e Bake ae es a 117 Customer Assistance llle 437 Data Recorder Event lille 60 Daytime Running Lights 99 Dealer Service llle 382 Defroster Rear Window 198 en INDEX 449 Defroster Windshield
314. sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position automatic trans mission or REVERSE or 1st gear manual transmission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise en STARTING AND OPERATING 309 the load on the transmission locking mechanism may When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the make it difficult to move the shifter out of PARK curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 1 WARNING The parking brake should always be applied whenever e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav the driver is not in the vehicle ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the aan E cram eee driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse m REVERSE Or Tst gean Failure to dono may allow braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a surfaces number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle the vehicle to roll and c
315. t operation 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction control lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is located on the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOT
316. t or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types Program Type Display Piostspi Type 16
317. te the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has g
318. tection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean
319. termittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Windshield Wiper Operation The windshield wiper washer control lever operates the windshield wipers and washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed wiper operation or to the third detent for HI speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the leve
320. th the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive Maintenance Free Battery and negative and identified on the battery case Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the You will never have to add water nor is periodic main vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before tenance required connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Hi ien poesia pot ance jour al oti For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information The air c
321. the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The sta tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact
322. the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure opti
323. ting elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 204 Two Types Of Signals lal Instrument Cluster 000 205 Electrical Disturbances B Instrument Cluster Description 206 AM Reception Sesarpa e y Ec ER 221 lll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 215 EM Reception i erat ER era er karte 221 Control Buttons sess 216 HH Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With Trip Coriditions c e eh 216 COURE AUR Mach 2 oreina ute dod Compass Temperature Display 217 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 222 Bl Radio General Information 220 yore ar e i E d 908 Radio Broadcast Signals 220 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 00 230 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack sse Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play
324. tion and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indi cator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4H and 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4L range or NEUTRAL back to 4H range the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP shoul
325. tions without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hands Free Phone UConnect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until t
326. to help os K Tn prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge D of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and shift a automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the hazard warning flasher Jack Warning Label ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 1 Remove spare tire jack and tools from stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect jack handle driver to extension then to lug wrench 4 Operate jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 3 t FRONT JACKING LOCATION aka 6 Jacking Locati
327. to improve visibility and provide UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MO PAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggres sively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may d
328. to off road mode 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove two nuts from bodyside ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 EE 2 Remove one bolt from underside of vehicle 3 Remove side step assembly 296 STARTING AND
329. to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will
330. ton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect9 in Section 3 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 8 Do not play discs that are small in size or have irregular shapes RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be l
331. try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline
332. tting the Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari ance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be ON Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone 15 the values will wrap around to Zone 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Compass Variance Zone Map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about five seconds then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation NOTE The U S Metric display will change from En glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears however it will revert back to its original setting after programming the compass func tions 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8040bf97 Outside Temperature If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 C the display will show 131 F 55 C When the outside tem perature is less than 40 F 40 C the display will show 40 F 40 C RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals The radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however automo ti
333. turing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 317 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location Two Door Models 318 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE Tire and Loading Information Placard y SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FR Tet 1 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPAN NEVER EXCEED XXX 2 TIRE REAR ORIGINAL TIRE S P195 70R14 T125 70015 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the t
334. uirements 0 000 e eee 424 Tank Capacity sno ene E Hoehne Rag 424 Fuel System Caution sss sses sisa sasssa 338 341 FUSES p ate pr hese raa a E HER OU E EE 413 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 340 380 Gasoline Fuel llle 336 Gasoline Reformulated 452 INDEX ea Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 337 Gauges Coolant Temperature llle ss 209 Fuel cos se fuexteteceen xv ibuni estri 206 Odometer sc ise ee kd epee eee tae 211 Speedometer s sae eerie eas 206 Tachometer x enesxn eo deduce rintaa 209 Gear Ranges cssc derame S EY 276 281 General Information 000 5 17 335 Glass Cleaning s cs ces ened did ie ere a 410 Gross Axle Weight Rating 342 345 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 342 345 GVWR dantes Seed ies arcs acento tae 342 Hands Free Phone UConnect 85 250 251 Hard Drive HDD lesen 250 Hard Top uoce aie Rente ain eee n ERR 125 Hard Top Modular sees 125 Hard Top Removal sae maa e ee 129 Hazard Warning Flasher 364 Head Restraints 2 0 0 0 0 00000 Nas 89 Head Rests asl ec RR Rel RR ds 89 Headlights Bulb Replacement 0004 420 Dimmer Switch 0 0 ee 98 Replacing nave og gota k tack Rp dr ted 420 Switch ic ve oe ca bee deme e ee eee ae des 97 Fl atet us uere aede dae he Wiese Oe 259 Heater Engine Block 0 0 04 275
335. ult if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idl
336. under instru seated ment panel Front Door Removal 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 3 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 2 2 Slide the front seat s fully forward 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of B pillar 5 Unhook the door strap from the body hook 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins 4 Unplug the wiring harness connector from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely cl
337. ur authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual 13 Airbag Warning Light This indicator lights and remains lit for six to 94 eight seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light does not come on for six to eight seconds stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped REAR 1hi5 light indicates when the rear axle lock has Q been activated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 15 Tachometer This light indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi AR tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light If Equipped Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System or Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 of this manual 18 Coolant Temperature Gauge E Indicates engine coolant temperature The red CAR zone to the far right indicates possible overheat ing Seek your authorized dealer immediately if the gauge operates in the red zone On U S vehicles the temperature is indicated in deg
338. ution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clea
339. ve radios have performance limitations due to mobile operation and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and six disc CD DVD changer if equipped A will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
340. wheel that has traction 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range E STARTING AND OPERATING 291 e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turn
341. when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL N and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Mi Starting Procedures lille 2710 W Manual Transmission 00 275 Manual Transmission less 271 SHRINE sa e Se ed hf Deae aes Automatic Transmission 271 Downshifting Normal Starting 000000 271 Reverse Shitting o a ring he ERE e ERES 278 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Bl Automatic Transmission lille 279 CREME egies ce aint Bah Neale aye Shift Lock
342. with metal objects To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press using the follow ing procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the key fob NOTE Pressing the LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds ee THINGS TO KN
343. y latched seat could cause serious injury es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Next locate handle in middle of the front end of the hood Insert hand into gap between hood and top of grille and push handle to the side to raise hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the handle Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood panel To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead light will come on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction control lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the UN LOCK button is pressed on the RKE key fob 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
344. y after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 332 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability es STARTING AND OPERATING 333 e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tir
345. y the soft top frame work when opening or closing Damage to the top may result 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up unless side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 Sail Panel 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Plastic Retainer 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door
346. your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts Check air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud or debris and clean as required A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body pro
347. ze coolant type CAUTION e Mixing of antifreeze coolants other than the speci fied HOAT antifreeze coolants may result in en gine damage and may decrease corrosion protec tion If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolants Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolants is not recommended 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 mi 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant When adding antifreeze coolant e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HO

2008 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents